6348 lines
275 KiB
OpenEdge ABL
6348 lines
275 KiB
OpenEdge ABL
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% IEEEtran.cls 2015/08/26 version V1.8b
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
|
||
|
|
%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
|
||
|
|
%% conferences.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Support sites:
|
||
|
|
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
|
||
|
|
%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
|
||
|
|
%% and
|
||
|
|
%% http://www.ieee.org/
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
|
||
|
|
%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Contributors:
|
||
|
|
%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
|
||
|
|
%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
|
||
|
|
%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014)
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
|
||
|
|
%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
|
||
|
|
%% Juergen von Hagen
|
||
|
|
%% and
|
||
|
|
%% Copyright (c) 2001-2015 by Michael Shell
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8b): Michael Shell
|
||
|
|
%% See:
|
||
|
|
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
|
||
|
|
%% for current contact information.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
||
|
|
%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
|
||
|
|
%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%%*************************************************************************
|
||
|
|
%% Legal Notice:
|
||
|
|
%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
|
||
|
|
%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
|
||
|
|
%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
|
||
|
|
%% User assumes all risk.
|
||
|
|
%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
|
||
|
|
%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
|
||
|
|
%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
|
||
|
|
%% of any information contained here.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
|
||
|
|
%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
|
||
|
|
%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
|
||
|
|
%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
|
||
|
|
%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
|
||
|
|
%% 2003/12/01 or later.
|
||
|
|
%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
|
||
|
|
%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
|
||
|
|
%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
|
||
|
|
%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
|
||
|
|
%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
|
||
|
|
%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
|
||
|
|
%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
|
||
|
|
%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
|
||
|
|
%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
|
||
|
|
%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
|
||
|
|
%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
|
||
|
|
%% correct version information.
|
||
|
|
%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
|
||
|
|
%%*************************************************************************
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Available class options
|
||
|
|
% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% *** choose only one from each category ***
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
|
||
|
|
% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
|
||
|
|
% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
|
||
|
|
% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
|
||
|
|
% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
|
||
|
|
% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
|
||
|
|
% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
|
||
|
|
% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
|
||
|
|
% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
|
||
|
|
% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
|
||
|
|
% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
|
||
|
|
% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
|
||
|
|
% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
|
||
|
|
% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
|
||
|
|
% information can be easily seen on the cover page.
|
||
|
|
% The default is journal.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
|
||
|
|
% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
|
||
|
|
% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
|
||
|
|
% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
|
||
|
|
% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
|
||
|
|
% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
|
||
|
|
% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
|
||
|
|
% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
|
||
|
|
% also want to select onecolumn.
|
||
|
|
% The default is final.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper
|
||
|
|
% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in.
|
||
|
|
% Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes
|
||
|
|
% will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will
|
||
|
|
% be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
|
||
|
|
% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
|
||
|
|
% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
|
||
|
|
% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
|
||
|
|
% For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will
|
||
|
|
% remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in
|
||
|
|
% the paper size.
|
||
|
|
% The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in)
|
||
|
|
% used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under
|
||
|
|
% compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the
|
||
|
|
% document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to
|
||
|
|
% do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to.
|
||
|
|
% For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter
|
||
|
|
% (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should
|
||
|
|
% ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper
|
||
|
|
% specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number
|
||
|
|
% one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the
|
||
|
|
% default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to
|
||
|
|
% pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix
|
||
|
|
% config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the
|
||
|
|
% dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option,
|
||
|
|
% the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs".
|
||
|
|
% See the testflow documentation
|
||
|
|
% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
|
||
|
|
% for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
|
||
|
|
% The default is letterpaper.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% oneside, twoside
|
||
|
|
% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
|
||
|
|
% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
|
||
|
|
% the pages.
|
||
|
|
% The default is oneside.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% onecolumn, twocolumn
|
||
|
|
% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
|
||
|
|
% column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
|
||
|
|
% The default is twocolumn.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% comsoc, compsoc, transmag
|
||
|
|
% Use the format of the IEEE Communications Society, IEEE Computer Society
|
||
|
|
% or IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, respectively.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% romanappendices
|
||
|
|
% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
|
||
|
|
% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b and earlier did.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% captionsoff
|
||
|
|
% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
|
||
|
|
% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
|
||
|
|
% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
|
||
|
|
% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% nofonttune
|
||
|
|
% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
|
||
|
|
% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
|
||
|
|
% their fonts.
|
||
|
|
% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%----------
|
||
|
|
% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
|
||
|
|
% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
|
||
|
|
% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
|
||
|
|
% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
||
|
|
% point size options provided as a single macro:
|
||
|
|
% \CLASSOPTIONpt
|
||
|
|
% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
|
||
|
|
% normalsize point size.
|
||
|
|
% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
|
||
|
|
% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2015/08/26 V1.8b by Michael Shell]
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
|
||
|
|
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
|
||
|
|
% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
|
||
|
|
% determine if the new features are provided.
|
||
|
|
% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
|
||
|
|
% these values. i.e., V1.4
|
||
|
|
% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
|
||
|
|
% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEtransversionminor{8}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@restonecol
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@titlepage
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% class option conditionals
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc \CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag \CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% class info conditionals
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
||
|
|
% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
|
||
|
|
% dimen
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% count
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC
|
||
|
|
% token list
|
||
|
|
\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
|
||
|
|
% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
|
||
|
|
% external packages
|
||
|
|
\def\@ptsize{0}
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% special paper option for compsoc journals
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingcspapertrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}%
|
||
|
|
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
|
||
|
|
% will go into draft mode.
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
||
|
|
% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
|
||
|
|
% used by the document.
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
||
|
|
% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
|
||
|
|
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{comsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{transmag}{\CLASSOPTIONtransmagtrue\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
|
||
|
|
\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
|
||
|
|
% overrride these defaults per user requests
|
||
|
|
\ProcessOptions
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Sets the category codes for punctuation to their normal values.
|
||
|
|
% For local use with argument scanning.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct{\catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\:=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\`=12 \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\.=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\/=12 \catcode`\?=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\+=12 \catcode`\-=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\(=12 \catcode`\)=12 \catcode`\[=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\]=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12}
|
||
|
|
% Sets the category codes for numbers to their normal values.
|
||
|
|
% For local use with argument scanning.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum{\catcode`\0=12 \catcode`\1=12 \catcode`\2=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\3=12 \catcode`\4=12 \catcode`\5=12 \catcode`\6=12 \catcode`\7=12
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\8=12 \catcode`\9=12}
|
||
|
|
% combined action of \IEEEnormalcatcodespunct and \IEEEnormalcatcodesnum
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodes{\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first
|
||
|
|
% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let
|
||
|
|
% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
|
||
|
|
% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded,
|
||
|
|
% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to
|
||
|
|
% be preserved.
|
||
|
|
% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or
|
||
|
|
% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% For example:
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
|
||
|
|
% results in:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument
|
||
|
|
% contents during processing.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty
|
||
|
|
% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument
|
||
|
|
% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument
|
||
|
|
% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true.
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg
|
||
|
|
\loop
|
||
|
|
% trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with
|
||
|
|
% \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
|
||
|
|
\repeat
|
||
|
|
% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token
|
||
|
|
% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
|
|
{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}}
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Computer Society conditional execution command
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
% inverse
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
% compsoc not conference
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% comsoc verify that newtxmath, mtpro2, mt11p or mathtime has been loaded
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\typeout{-- Verifying Times compatible math font.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@ifpackageloaded{newtxmath}{\typeout{-- newtxmath loaded, OK.}}{\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mtpro2}{\typeout{-- mtpro2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mt11p}{\typeout{-- mt11p2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mathtime}{\typeout{-- mathtime loaded, OK.}}{\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% comsoc, if a Times math font was not loaded by user, enforce it
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** Times compatible math font not found, forcing.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{\typeout{-- Found newtxmath, loading.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}{\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mtpro2.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mtpro2, loading.}\RequirePackage{mtpro2}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mt11p.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mt11p, loading.}\RequirePackage{mt11p}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mathtime.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mathtime, loading.}\RequirePackage{mathtime}}{\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
|
||
|
|
% if no acceptable Times math font package found, error with newtxmath requirement
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** No Times compatible math font package found. newtxmath is required.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
|
||
|
|
% ensure that if newtxmath is used, the cmintegrals option is also invoked
|
||
|
|
\PassOptionsToPackage{cmintegrals}{newtxmath}
|
||
|
|
% comsoc requires a Times like math font
|
||
|
|
% ensure this requirement is satisfied at document start
|
||
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
|
||
|
|
% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
|
||
|
|
% not Times Roman.
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% enable the selected main text font
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\selectfont
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Using IEEE Communications Society mode.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 conference notice message hook
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ of your paper;}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
|
||
|
|
\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
|
||
|
|
% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
|
||
|
|
% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
|
||
|
|
% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
|
||
|
|
% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
|
||
|
|
{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
|
||
|
|
% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
|
||
|
|
% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
|
||
|
|
% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
|
||
|
|
\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
|
||
|
|
\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
|
||
|
|
% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
|
||
|
|
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
||
|
|
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
|
||
|
|
\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
|
||
|
|
\fi}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% let the user know the selected papersize
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
|
||
|
|
(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSINFOpdf
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
|
||
|
|
% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
|
||
|
|
% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
|
||
|
|
% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
|
||
|
|
% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
|
||
|
|
% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
|
||
|
|
% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
|
||
|
|
%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
|
||
|
|
%\def\@journal{}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% pointsize values
|
||
|
|
% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
|
||
|
|
% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
|
||
|
|
% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
|
||
|
|
% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)
|
||
|
|
% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)
|
||
|
|
% 10pt 58 12pt (exact)
|
||
|
|
% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)
|
||
|
|
% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
|
||
|
|
% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
|
||
|
|
% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% ******* WARNING! *******
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"),
|
||
|
|
%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more
|
||
|
|
%% material on each page.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct
|
||
|
|
%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document,
|
||
|
|
%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges.
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% ******* WARNING! *******
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% 9pt option defaults
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 10pt option defaults
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 11pt option defaults
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 12pt option defaults
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a compsoc font sizes
|
||
|
|
% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in)
|
||
|
|
% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27)
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% -- compsoc defaults --
|
||
|
|
% ** will override some of these values later **
|
||
|
|
% 9pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 10pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 11pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 12pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}%
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
|
||
|
|
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp
|
||
|
|
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}}
|
||
|
|
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes --
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conferences
|
||
|
|
% 9pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 10pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 11pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 12pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% compsoc nonconferences
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% 9pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 10pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
||
|
|
% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt,
|
||
|
|
% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading
|
||
|
|
% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column
|
||
|
|
% with the standard compsoc margins
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 11pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% 12pt
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
||
|
|
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
|
||
|
|
\normalsize
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
|
||
|
|
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
|
||
|
|
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
|
||
|
|
% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct
|
||
|
|
% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution
|
||
|
|
% tolerance to turn off this warning.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution
|
||
|
|
% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized
|
||
|
|
% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more.
|
||
|
|
\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
|
||
|
|
% technote
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7
|
||
|
|
% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
|
||
|
|
% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
|
||
|
|
% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
|
||
|
|
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
|
||
|
|
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
|
||
|
|
\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set the default \baselinestretch
|
||
|
|
\def\baselinestretch{1}
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
\def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
|
||
|
|
\baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% store the normalsize baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% we could save a register by giving the user access to
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
|
||
|
|
% its read only internal status
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
% store the nominal value of jot
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set \jot
|
||
|
|
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
|
||
|
|
% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
|
||
|
|
% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
|
||
|
|
% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
|
||
|
|
% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% However, the IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
|
||
|
|
% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, the IEEE
|
||
|
|
% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
|
||
|
|
% 35% nominal
|
||
|
|
% 23% minimum
|
||
|
|
% 50% maximum
|
||
|
|
% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% for bold text, the IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
|
||
|
|
% 37.5% nominal
|
||
|
|
% 23% minimum
|
||
|
|
% 55% maximum
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
|
||
|
|
% for medium (normal weight)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% for bold
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino,
|
||
|
|
% tweak settings to better match the proofs
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
|
||
|
|
% for medium (normal weight)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47}
|
||
|
|
% for bold
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52}
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
|
||
|
|
% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
|
||
|
|
% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
|
||
|
|
% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
|
||
|
|
% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
|
||
|
|
% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
||
|
|
\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
||
|
|
\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
||
|
|
\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
||
|
|
\mdseries
|
||
|
|
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
|
||
|
|
\bfseries
|
||
|
|
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
|
||
|
|
}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
|
||
|
|
% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
|
||
|
|
% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what the IEEE uses) so we
|
||
|
|
% won't alter these either.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
||
|
|
\normalfont
|
||
|
|
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\itshape
|
||
|
|
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
|
||
|
|
% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
|
||
|
|
% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
|
||
|
|
\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
||
|
|
\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
|
||
|
|
% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
|
||
|
|
% sure all the default fonts are loaded
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtunefonts
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
|
||
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% -- V1.8a page setup commands --
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The default sample text for calculating margins
|
||
|
|
% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin}
|
||
|
|
% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins
|
||
|
|
% for the current \paperwidth.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset}
|
||
|
|
% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin
|
||
|
|
% of the given mode.
|
||
|
|
% The available modes are:
|
||
|
|
% i = inner margin
|
||
|
|
% o = outer margin
|
||
|
|
% c = centered, with the given offset
|
||
|
|
% a = adjust the margins using the given offset
|
||
|
|
% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin.
|
||
|
|
% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this
|
||
|
|
% function.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for mode errors
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% handle each mode
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
|
||
|
|
\oddsidemargin\paperwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
|
||
|
|
\divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax
|
||
|
|
\oddsidemargin\paperwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `i'}%
|
||
|
|
{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages
|
||
|
|
\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
|
||
|
|
% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect
|
||
|
|
\if@twoside
|
||
|
|
\evensidemargin\paperwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin
|
||
|
|
% have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset
|
||
|
|
% and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin
|
||
|
|
\advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin}
|
||
|
|
% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin.
|
||
|
|
% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the
|
||
|
|
% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin
|
||
|
|
\advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip
|
||
|
|
% subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length}
|
||
|
|
% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given
|
||
|
|
% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given
|
||
|
|
% length.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units
|
||
|
|
% in \IEEEquantizedlength.
|
||
|
|
% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit
|
||
|
|
% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized:
|
||
|
|
% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint)
|
||
|
|
% c = use the closest match
|
||
|
|
% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint)
|
||
|
|
% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized,
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup
|
||
|
|
% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp
|
||
|
|
% variables
|
||
|
|
% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
|
||
|
|
% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength,
|
||
|
|
% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters,
|
||
|
|
% i.e., in sp units
|
||
|
|
% A has the base unit
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
|
||
|
|
% B has the input length
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff
|
||
|
|
% initialize them to zero as this is what will be
|
||
|
|
% exported if an error occurs
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
% extract mode
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for mode errors
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% check for base unit is zero error
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
\string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% base unit is nonzero
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units
|
||
|
|
% in the quantized length (integer length \ base)
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length
|
||
|
|
% = base * int
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference
|
||
|
|
% = quantized length - length
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
% trap special case of length being already quantized
|
||
|
|
% to avoid a roundup under i option
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\else % length not is already quantized
|
||
|
|
% set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference:
|
||
|
|
% quantizedlength + base - length
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
% set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference:
|
||
|
|
% length - quantizedlength
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
|
||
|
|
% handle each mode
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
|
||
|
|
% compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
% use upper
|
||
|
|
\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\else% <=. uselower
|
||
|
|
% no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else% not mode c
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
|
||
|
|
% always round up under i mode
|
||
|
|
\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `d'}%
|
||
|
|
{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi % if d
|
||
|
|
% no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi % if i, c
|
||
|
|
\fi % if length is already quantized
|
||
|
|
\fi% if base unit is zero
|
||
|
|
% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
|
||
|
|
% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i}
|
||
|
|
% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between
|
||
|
|
% the new quantized and original \textheight.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of
|
||
|
|
% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e.,
|
||
|
|
% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip
|
||
|
|
% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized:
|
||
|
|
% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column)
|
||
|
|
% c = use the closest match
|
||
|
|
% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column)
|
||
|
|
% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged,
|
||
|
|
% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero.
|
||
|
|
% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup
|
||
|
|
% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad
|
||
|
|
% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff}
|
||
|
|
% add back \topskip line
|
||
|
|
\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
|
||
|
|
% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
|
||
|
|
% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
|
||
|
|
\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset}
|
||
|
|
% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin.
|
||
|
|
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep,
|
||
|
|
% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth)
|
||
|
|
% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
|
||
|
|
% The available modes are:
|
||
|
|
% t = top margin
|
||
|
|
% b = bottom margin
|
||
|
|
% c = vertically centered, with the given offset
|
||
|
|
% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset
|
||
|
|
% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset
|
||
|
|
% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin.
|
||
|
|
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the
|
||
|
|
% given margins before calling this function.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for mode errors
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% handle each mode
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax
|
||
|
|
% we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
|
||
|
|
% a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin
|
||
|
|
% because \textheight has been lenghtened
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
|
||
|
|
\topmargin\paperheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\textheight
|
||
|
|
% \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by \topskip
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\divide\topmargin by 2\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
|
||
|
|
\topmargin\paperheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\textheight
|
||
|
|
% \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by \topskip
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}%
|
||
|
|
{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
|
||
|
|
% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin
|
||
|
|
% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by -\topskip
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by -1in
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by -\headheight
|
||
|
|
\advance \topmargin by -\headsep
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi % if q, a
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
|
||
|
|
% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged)
|
||
|
|
% based on the specified header margin.
|
||
|
|
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default)
|
||
|
|
% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
|
||
|
|
% The available modes are:
|
||
|
|
% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page)
|
||
|
|
% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text)
|
||
|
|
% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page,
|
||
|
|
% with the given offset
|
||
|
|
% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
|
||
|
|
% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward.
|
||
|
|
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before
|
||
|
|
% calling this function.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for mode errors
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% handle each mode
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
|
||
|
|
% No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
|
||
|
|
% value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will
|
||
|
|
% do all that is needed
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
|
||
|
|
% get the bottom margin
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
|
||
|
|
% subtract from it the top header margin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins
|
||
|
|
% we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
|
||
|
|
% and add to offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
|
||
|
|
% get the difference between the actual and the desired
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}%
|
||
|
|
{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin
|
||
|
|
% get the difference between the desired and the actual
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
|
||
|
|
\fi % if a
|
||
|
|
% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same
|
||
|
|
% so as not to disturb the location of the main text
|
||
|
|
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
|
||
|
|
% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin.
|
||
|
|
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight,
|
||
|
|
% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
|
||
|
|
% The available modes are:
|
||
|
|
% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text)
|
||
|
|
% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page)
|
||
|
|
% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page,
|
||
|
|
% with the given offset
|
||
|
|
% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
|
||
|
|
% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward.
|
||
|
|
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set
|
||
|
|
% properly before calling this function.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for mode errors
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% handle each mode
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
|
||
|
|
% No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
|
||
|
|
% value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that
|
||
|
|
% is needed
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
|
||
|
|
% calculate the bottom margin
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
|
||
|
|
% now subtract off the footer top margin
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom
|
||
|
|
% and top footer margins
|
||
|
|
% our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
|
||
|
|
% add to the offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
|
||
|
|
% calculate the bottom margin
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
|
||
|
|
% get the difference between the actual and the desired
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Defaulting to `t'}%
|
||
|
|
{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
|
||
|
|
% at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin
|
||
|
|
% get the difference between the desired and the actual
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
|
||
|
|
\fi % if a
|
||
|
|
% advance \footskip by the needed amount
|
||
|
|
\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% -- End V1.8a page setup commands --
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
|
||
|
|
% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
|
||
|
|
% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
|
||
|
|
% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
|
||
|
|
% but the appearance will be much better "right out
|
||
|
|
% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
|
||
|
|
% TeX default is 50
|
||
|
|
\hyphenpenalty=750
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\hyphenpenalty 500
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
|
||
|
|
% The TeX default is 1000
|
||
|
|
\hbadness=1350
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
|
||
|
|
\frenchspacing
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
|
||
|
|
\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
|
||
|
|
\relpenalty=800 % default 500
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans
|
||
|
|
\clubpenalty=1000 % default 150
|
||
|
|
\widowpenalty=1000 % default 150
|
||
|
|
\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default 50
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% margin note stuff
|
||
|
|
\marginparsep 10pt
|
||
|
|
\marginparwidth 20pt
|
||
|
|
\marginparpush 25pt
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
|
||
|
|
\lineskip 0pt
|
||
|
|
\normallineskip 0pt
|
||
|
|
\lineskiplimit 0pt
|
||
|
|
\normallineskiplimit 0pt
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
|
||
|
|
% footline
|
||
|
|
\footskip 0.4in
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
|
||
|
|
% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
|
||
|
|
\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\parindent 1.0em
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\parindent 1.5em
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\headheight 12pt
|
||
|
|
\headsep 18pt
|
||
|
|
% use the normal font baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
|
||
|
|
\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent
|
||
|
|
\maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set the default top margin to 58pt
|
||
|
|
% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt}
|
||
|
|
% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column.
|
||
|
|
% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
|
||
|
|
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\columnsep 1pc
|
||
|
|
\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set the default side margins to center the text
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% adjust margins for default conference mode
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
\textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in}
|
||
|
|
% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
||
|
|
% standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
|
||
|
|
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\columnsep 12bp
|
||
|
|
% CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in
|
||
|
|
% \textwidth 6.875in
|
||
|
|
% however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns
|
||
|
|
\textwidth 7in
|
||
|
|
\advance\textwidth by \columnsep
|
||
|
|
% set the side margins to center the text
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
% top/bottom margins to center
|
||
|
|
% could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes
|
||
|
|
% and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy
|
||
|
|
% future per-paper size adjustments
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in}
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEusingcspaper
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in)
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
||
|
|
% standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
|
||
|
|
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
|
||
|
|
\columnsep 0.25in
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in}
|
||
|
|
% set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper)
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
|
||
|
|
% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
||
|
|
% standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
|
||
|
|
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
|
||
|
|
% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
|
||
|
|
% space between the lines for editor's comments
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
% we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
% want 1in top and bottom margins
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
|
||
|
|
% digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
|
||
|
|
% this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad
|
||
|
|
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
|
||
|
|
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
|
||
|
|
% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
|
||
|
|
outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
|
||
|
|
% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
||
|
|
\edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
|
||
|
|
bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% default to center header and footer text in the margins
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight
|
||
|
|
% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1
|
||
|
|
% save lines per column value as text
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB}
|
||
|
|
% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1
|
||
|
|
% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines
|
||
|
|
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% is the column height an integer number of lines per column?
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}}
|
||
|
|
% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes
|
||
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
|
||
|
|
% above and below \trivlist
|
||
|
|
% Both \list and IED lists override this.
|
||
|
|
% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
|
||
|
|
% things built from \trivlist like the \center
|
||
|
|
% environment.
|
||
|
|
\topsep 0.5\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
|
||
|
|
% or followed by blank lines. the IEEE does not increase
|
||
|
|
% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
|
||
|
|
% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
|
||
|
|
\partopsep \z@
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
|
||
|
|
% so this is also zero.
|
||
|
|
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
|
||
|
|
% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
|
||
|
|
\parsep \z@
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Controls the extra spacing between list items.
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
|
||
|
|
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
|
||
|
|
% lists (but not IED lists).
|
||
|
|
\itemsep \z@
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
|
||
|
|
% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
|
||
|
|
% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
|
||
|
|
% However, the IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
|
||
|
|
% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
|
||
|
|
\itemindent -1em
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
|
||
|
|
% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
|
||
|
|
% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
|
||
|
|
% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
|
||
|
|
\leftmargin 2em
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
|
||
|
|
% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
|
||
|
|
% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
|
||
|
|
% all are overridden.
|
||
|
|
\leftmargini 2em
|
||
|
|
%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.
|
||
|
|
%\leftmargini 0em
|
||
|
|
\leftmarginii 1em
|
||
|
|
\leftmarginiii 1.5em
|
||
|
|
\leftmarginiv 1.5em
|
||
|
|
\leftmarginv 1.0em
|
||
|
|
\leftmarginvi 1.0em
|
||
|
|
\labelsep 0.5em
|
||
|
|
\labelwidth \z@
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
|
||
|
|
% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
|
||
|
|
% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
|
||
|
|
% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
|
||
|
|
% \topsep is now 2pt as the IEEE puts a little extra space around
|
||
|
|
% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
|
||
|
|
% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
|
||
|
|
% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
|
||
|
|
% of these values DO affect \list
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
|
||
|
|
\let\@listI\@listi
|
||
|
|
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
|
||
|
|
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
||
|
|
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
|
||
|
|
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
||
|
|
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
|
||
|
|
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
||
|
|
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
|
||
|
|
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
||
|
|
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
|
||
|
|
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses 5) not 5.
|
||
|
|
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses a) not (a)
|
||
|
|
\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses iii) not iii.
|
||
|
|
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses A) not A.
|
||
|
|
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% exactly the same as in article.cls
|
||
|
|
\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
|
||
|
|
\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
|
||
|
|
\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% itemized list label styles
|
||
|
|
\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
|
||
|
|
\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
|
||
|
|
\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
|
||
|
|
\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
|
||
|
|
% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
|
||
|
|
% ***************************
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
|
||
|
|
% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
|
||
|
|
% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
|
||
|
|
% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
|
||
|
|
% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
|
||
|
|
% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
|
||
|
|
% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
|
||
|
|
% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
|
||
|
|
% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
|
||
|
|
\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
|
||
|
|
\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
|
||
|
|
% However, we'll default to using \parindent
|
||
|
|
% which makes more sense to me
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
|
||
|
|
\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
|
||
|
|
% are indented to the right.
|
||
|
|
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
|
||
|
|
\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This controls the default amount the description list labels
|
||
|
|
% are indented to the right.
|
||
|
|
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
|
||
|
|
\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
|
||
|
|
% The IED environments automatically set its value to
|
||
|
|
% one of the three values above, so global changes do
|
||
|
|
% not have any effect
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
\IEEElabelindent \parindent
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The actual amount labels will be indented is
|
||
|
|
% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
|
||
|
|
% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
|
||
|
|
% This provides a means by which the user can
|
||
|
|
% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
|
||
|
|
% levels
|
||
|
|
% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
|
||
|
|
% values. What the IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
|
||
|
|
% circumstances.
|
||
|
|
% The first list level almost always has full indention.
|
||
|
|
% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
|
||
|
|
% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
|
||
|
|
% that they don't use any indentation.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
|
||
|
|
% set to one of the 6 values above
|
||
|
|
% global changes here have no effect
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
||
|
|
% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
|
||
|
|
% the labels.
|
||
|
|
% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
|
||
|
|
% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
|
||
|
|
% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
||
|
|
% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
|
||
|
|
% the labels (nomenclature lists). The IEEE usually increases the
|
||
|
|
% spacing in these cases
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
|
||
|
|
% below each IED list. the IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
|
||
|
|
% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
|
||
|
|
% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
|
||
|
|
% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
|
||
|
|
% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
|
||
|
|
\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This command is executed within each IED list environment
|
||
|
|
% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
|
||
|
|
% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
|
||
|
|
% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
|
||
|
|
% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
|
||
|
|
% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
|
||
|
|
% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
|
||
|
|
% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
|
||
|
|
% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
|
||
|
|
% width of the given text. It is the same as
|
||
|
|
% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
|
||
|
|
% and useful as a shorter alternative.
|
||
|
|
% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
|
||
|
|
% of the longest label in the list
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
|
||
|
|
% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
|
||
|
|
% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
|
||
|
|
% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
||
|
|
% environments.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
|
||
|
|
% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
|
||
|
|
% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
|
||
|
|
% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
|
||
|
|
% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
||
|
|
% environments to have an effect.
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
|
||
|
|
% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
|
||
|
|
% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
|
||
|
|
% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
|
||
|
|
% justification
|
||
|
|
% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% commands to allow the user to control IED
|
||
|
|
% label justifications. Use these commands within
|
||
|
|
% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
|
||
|
|
% Note that changing the normal list justifications
|
||
|
|
% is nonstandard and the IEEE may not like it if you do so!
|
||
|
|
% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
|
||
|
|
% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
|
||
|
|
% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
|
||
|
|
% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
|
||
|
|
% justification, description defaults to left.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
|
||
|
|
% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
|
||
|
|
% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
|
||
|
|
% from overriding any of our parameters
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
|
||
|
|
\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
|
||
|
|
\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
|
||
|
|
\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
|
||
|
|
\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
|
||
|
|
\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
|
||
|
|
\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
|
||
|
|
\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
|
||
|
|
\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
|
||
|
|
% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
|
||
|
|
% which must be created by the base classes
|
||
|
|
% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
|
||
|
|
\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
|
||
|
|
\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
|
||
|
|
\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
|
||
|
|
\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
|
||
|
|
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
|
||
|
|
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
|
||
|
|
{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% override LaTeX's default IED lists
|
||
|
|
\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
||
|
|
\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
||
|
|
\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
||
|
|
\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
||
|
|
\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
|
||
|
|
\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
|
||
|
|
% override itemize, enumerate, or description
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
|
||
|
|
% commands so they are protected against redefinition
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
||
|
|
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
|
||
|
|
% get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
||
|
|
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
||
|
|
% set other defaults
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
||
|
|
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
||
|
|
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
|
||
|
|
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
||
|
|
\partopsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\parsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\itemsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin 0em%
|
||
|
|
\listparindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
\itemindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
% calculate the label width
|
||
|
|
% the user can override this later if
|
||
|
|
% they specified a \labelwidth
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
||
|
|
\list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
||
|
|
% to our globals
|
||
|
|
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
||
|
|
#1\relax%
|
||
|
|
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
||
|
|
% IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
||
|
|
% calculate our left margin based
|
||
|
|
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
||
|
|
% \labelsep
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
||
|
|
\fi}\fi\fi}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
||
|
|
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
|
||
|
|
% get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
||
|
|
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
||
|
|
% set other defaults
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
||
|
|
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
||
|
|
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
|
||
|
|
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
||
|
|
\partopsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\parsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\itemsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin 0em%
|
||
|
|
\listparindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
\itemindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
% calculate the label width
|
||
|
|
% We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
|
||
|
|
% normalfont 1) to 9)
|
||
|
|
% The user can override this later
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
||
|
|
\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
||
|
|
% to our globals
|
||
|
|
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
||
|
|
#1\relax%
|
||
|
|
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
||
|
|
% IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
||
|
|
% calculate our left margin based
|
||
|
|
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
||
|
|
% \labelsep
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
||
|
|
\fi}\fi\fi}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
||
|
|
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
|
||
|
|
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
||
|
|
% get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
||
|
|
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
|
||
|
|
% set other defaults
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
||
|
|
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
||
|
|
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
||
|
|
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
|
||
|
|
% assume normal labelsep
|
||
|
|
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
||
|
|
\partopsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\parsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\itemsep 0ex%
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin 0em%
|
||
|
|
\listparindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
\itemindent 0em%
|
||
|
|
% Bogus label width in case the user forgets
|
||
|
|
% to set it.
|
||
|
|
% TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
|
||
|
|
% can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
|
||
|
|
% display it on the screen during compilation
|
||
|
|
% (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
|
||
|
|
% which label is the widest)
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
||
|
|
\list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
||
|
|
% to our globals
|
||
|
|
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
||
|
|
#1\relax%
|
||
|
|
% If the user has requested not to use the
|
||
|
|
% labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
||
|
|
% calculate our left margin based
|
||
|
|
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
||
|
|
% \labelsep
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi}\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
|
||
|
|
\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
|
||
|
|
\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
||
|
|
\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep
|
||
|
|
% and also extra spacing above and below each list
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em
|
||
|
|
\IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% VERSE and QUOTE
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
|
||
|
|
\list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
|
||
|
|
{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
|
||
|
|
\rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
|
||
|
|
{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
|
||
|
|
{\endlist}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \titlepage
|
||
|
|
% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
|
||
|
|
% way to create the title page.
|
||
|
|
\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
|
||
|
|
\else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
|
||
|
|
\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% standard values from article.cls
|
||
|
|
\arraycolsep 5pt
|
||
|
|
\arrayrulewidth .4pt
|
||
|
|
\doublerulesep 2pt
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\tabcolsep 6pt
|
||
|
|
\tabbingsep 0.5em
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% FOOTNOTES
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
|
||
|
|
% space added above the footnotes (if present)
|
||
|
|
\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
|
||
|
|
% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
|
||
|
|
% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
|
||
|
|
% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
|
||
|
|
% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% above the baseline and 0.3\baselineskip below it, we need to
|
||
|
|
% use 0.7\baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
|
||
|
|
% between all the lines of the footnotes. The IEEE often uses a tad
|
||
|
|
% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
|
||
|
|
% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
|
||
|
|
% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
|
||
|
|
{\footnotesize
|
||
|
|
\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
|
||
|
|
\fboxsep = 3pt
|
||
|
|
\fboxrule = .4pt
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
|
||
|
|
% Note that the IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
|
||
|
|
% box resizing tricks here.
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not use footnote rules
|
||
|
|
\def\footnoterule{}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 for compsoc, the IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
|
||
|
|
% system to implement this.
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
||
|
|
\kern-5pt
|
||
|
|
\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
|
||
|
|
\kern4.6pt
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
|
||
|
|
\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
|
||
|
|
% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
|
||
|
|
% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
|
||
|
|
\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% technotes do not allow /paragraph
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% neither do compsoc conferences
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{section}
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
|
||
|
|
% have their own, different, implementations
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
|
||
|
|
\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1
|
||
|
|
\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% compsoc is all arabic
|
||
|
|
\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
||
|
|
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I
|
||
|
|
% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by the IEEE rather than I-A.1
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1
|
||
|
|
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
|
||
|
|
% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
|
||
|
|
% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
|
||
|
|
% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
|
||
|
|
\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
|
||
|
|
\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
|
||
|
|
% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
|
||
|
|
% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
|
||
|
|
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
|
||
|
|
\else% compsoc not conferencs
|
||
|
|
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
||
|
|
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else% not compsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.
|
||
|
|
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)
|
||
|
|
\def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
|
||
|
|
\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
|
||
|
|
% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
|
||
|
|
% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
|
||
|
|
% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
|
||
|
|
\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
|
||
|
|
\def\contentsname{Contents}
|
||
|
|
\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
|
||
|
|
\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
|
||
|
|
\def\refname{References}
|
||
|
|
\def\indexname{Index}
|
||
|
|
\def\figurename{Fig.}
|
||
|
|
\def\tablename{TABLE}
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}}
|
||
|
|
\def\partname{Part}
|
||
|
|
\def\appendixname{Appendix}
|
||
|
|
\def\abstractname{Abstract}
|
||
|
|
% IEEE specific names
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
|
||
|
|
\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
|
||
|
|
\def\@dotsep{4.5}
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
|
||
|
|
% collide with the section titles.
|
||
|
|
% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
|
||
|
|
% MDS 1/2001
|
||
|
|
\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
|
||
|
|
\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
|
||
|
|
\@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
|
||
|
|
\parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
|
||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
||
|
|
% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
|
||
|
|
\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
|
||
|
|
\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
|
||
|
|
% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
|
||
|
|
% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
|
||
|
|
% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
|
||
|
|
\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
|
||
|
|
\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
|
||
|
|
\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
|
||
|
|
\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
|
||
|
|
\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
|
||
|
|
\let\l@table\l@figure
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Definitions for floats
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Normal Floats
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 floatsep et al. revised down by 0.15\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% to account for the sideeffects of \topskip compensation
|
||
|
|
\floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
||
|
|
\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
||
|
|
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
||
|
|
\def\topfraction{0.9}
|
||
|
|
\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
|
||
|
|
\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
|
||
|
|
\def\textfraction{0.1}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Double Column Floats
|
||
|
|
\dblfloatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\dbltextfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
|
||
|
|
% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
|
||
|
|
% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
|
||
|
|
% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
|
||
|
|
% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
|
||
|
|
% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
|
||
|
|
% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
|
||
|
|
% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
|
||
|
|
% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
||
|
|
\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
||
|
|
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
||
|
|
\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
|
||
|
|
\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\intextsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% article class provides these, we should too.
|
||
|
|
\newlength\abovecaptionskip
|
||
|
|
\newlength\belowcaptionskip
|
||
|
|
% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
|
||
|
|
% captions
|
||
|
|
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
% compsoc journals are a little more generous
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
|
||
|
|
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
|
||
|
|
% overridden by a user
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
|
||
|
|
% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 compensate for \topskip so top of top figures align with tops of the first lines of main text
|
||
|
|
% here we calculate a space equal to the amount \topskip exceeds the main text height
|
||
|
|
% we hook in at \@floatboxreset
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\relax
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{1\topskip}\relax
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-0.7\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\relax
|
||
|
|
\vspace*{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\fi}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 compensate for \topskip at the top of top tables so caption text is on main text baseline
|
||
|
|
% use a strut set on the caption baseline within \@makecaption
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\rule{0pt}{\topskip}\fi}
|
||
|
|
% the \ifdim\prevdepth checks are always expected to be true for IEEE style float caption ordering
|
||
|
|
% because top of figure content and top of captions in tables is the first thing on the vertical
|
||
|
|
% list of these floats
|
||
|
|
% thanks to Donald Arseneau for his 2000/11/11 post "Re: caption hacking" with info on this topic.
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
||
|
|
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
||
|
|
% if a table, do table caption
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
|
||
|
|
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is shorter than a line, center
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\else% nonconference compsoc
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
||
|
|
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
||
|
|
% if a table, do table caption
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
|
||
|
|
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
||
|
|
% test if is a for a figure or table
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
||
|
|
% if a table, do table caption
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
% if not a table, format it as a figure
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
||
|
|
% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace #2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace}%
|
||
|
|
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
||
|
|
% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
||
|
|
\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
|
||
|
|
% within \caption
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering{\footnotesize #1}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
|
||
|
|
% preview-latex
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{figure}
|
||
|
|
\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
|
||
|
|
\def\fps@figure{tbp}
|
||
|
|
\def\ftype@figure{1}
|
||
|
|
\def\ext@figure{lof}
|
||
|
|
\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 within figures add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset
|
||
|
|
\def\figure{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@float{figure}}
|
||
|
|
\def\endfigure{\end@float}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 also add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to \figure*
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{figure*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@dblfloat{figure}}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{table}
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\def\fps@table{tbp}
|
||
|
|
\def\ftype@table{2}
|
||
|
|
\def\ext@table{lot}
|
||
|
|
\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable}
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 The IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
|
||
|
|
% within tables alter LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset to use \footnotesize
|
||
|
|
\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
|
||
|
|
\def\endtable{\end@float}
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
|
||
|
|
%% V1.8a
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores
|
||
|
|
% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing
|
||
|
|
% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% For example:
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}}
|
||
|
|
% results in:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument
|
||
|
|
% contents during processing
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited
|
||
|
|
% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing
|
||
|
|
% braces. Loop until this is true.
|
||
|
|
\loop
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces
|
||
|
|
\repeat}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group"
|
||
|
|
% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup.
|
||
|
|
% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite
|
||
|
|
% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty.
|
||
|
|
% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first
|
||
|
|
% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer
|
||
|
|
% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% For example:
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}}
|
||
|
|
% results in:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument
|
||
|
|
% contents during processing.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around
|
||
|
|
% whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner
|
||
|
|
% will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an
|
||
|
|
% empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group.
|
||
|
|
% In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure
|
||
|
|
% we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow
|
||
|
|
% what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for
|
||
|
|
% \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it.
|
||
|
|
\ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after
|
||
|
|
% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the
|
||
|
|
% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear
|
||
|
|
% during run time.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores
|
||
|
|
% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of
|
||
|
|
% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup.
|
||
|
|
% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token
|
||
|
|
% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken
|
||
|
|
% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first
|
||
|
|
% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax
|
||
|
|
% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
|
||
|
|
% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace
|
||
|
|
% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved.
|
||
|
|
% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup.
|
||
|
|
% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup,
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken,
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded.
|
||
|
|
% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces,
|
||
|
|
% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will
|
||
|
|
% be empty if none exist.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% For example:
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
|
||
|
|
% will result in:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g}
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax
|
||
|
|
% and all the macros will be empty.
|
||
|
|
% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument
|
||
|
|
% contents during processing.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments
|
||
|
|
% first group
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
|
||
|
|
% first first group
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
|
||
|
|
% next group
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
|
||
|
|
% next first group
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
|
||
|
|
%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
|
||
|
|
%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
|
||
|
|
%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
|
||
|
|
%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
|
||
|
|
% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
|
||
|
|
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% The default math style used by the columns
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
|
||
|
|
% The default text style used by the columns
|
||
|
|
% default to using the current font
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 flags to indicate that equation numbering is to persist
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpersist%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 flags to indicate if (sub)equation number of last line was preadvanced
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback% saves previous value of IEEEsubequation number in case we need to restore it
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
|
||
|
|
% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
|
||
|
|
% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
|
||
|
|
% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
|
||
|
|
% This command is intended for use in non-IEEEeqnarray math environments
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEyes/nonumber
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 add persistant * forms
|
||
|
|
% These commands can alter the type of equation an IEEEeqnarray line is.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEyesnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEyesnumber}{\@IEEEyesnumber}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% even if we reached this eqn num via a preadv, it is legit now
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEnonumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\global\@eqnswfalse}{\global\@eqnswfalse}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEyessubnumber}{\@IEEEyessubnumber}}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEyessubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% if it already is a subequation, we are good to go as-is
|
||
|
|
\else% if we are a regular equation we have to watch out for two cases
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% if this equation is the result of a preadvance, backout and bump the sub eqnnum
|
||
|
|
\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\addtocounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% non-preadvanced equations just need initialization of their sub eqnnum
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi% fi already is subequation
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
|
||
|
|
\global\@eqnswtrue
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEnosubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEnosubnumber}{\@IEEEnosubnumber}}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEnosubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\if@eqnsw % we do nothing unless we know we will display because we play with the counters here
|
||
|
|
% if it currently is a subequation, bump up to the next equation number and turn off the subequation
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\addtocounter{equation}{1}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
|
||
|
|
% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
|
||
|
|
% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% check if column is defined for the precolumn definition
|
||
|
|
% We have to be careful here because TeX scans for & even within an \iffalse
|
||
|
|
% where it does not expand macros. So, if we used only one \ifx and a #3
|
||
|
|
% appeared in the false branch and the user inserted another alignment
|
||
|
|
% structure that uses & in the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{}, TeX will not see that
|
||
|
|
% there is an inner alignment in the false branch yet still will see any &
|
||
|
|
% there and will think that they apply to the outer alignment resulting in an
|
||
|
|
% incomplete \ifx error.
|
||
|
|
% So, here we use separate checks for the pre and post parts in order to keep
|
||
|
|
% the #3 outside of all conditionals.
|
||
|
|
\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
|
||
|
|
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname
|
||
|
|
\else% if not, error and use default type
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Using a default centering column instead}%
|
||
|
|
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
||
|
|
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% The ten \relax are to help prevent misleading error messages in case a user
|
||
|
|
% accidently inserted a macro that tries to acquire additional arguments.
|
||
|
|
#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
|
||
|
|
% check if column is defined for the postcolumn definition
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
|
||
|
|
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname
|
||
|
|
\else% if not, use the default type
|
||
|
|
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
|
||
|
|
% used to build up the \halign preamble
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
|
||
|
|
\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
|
||
|
|
% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
|
||
|
|
\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% define some common column types for the user
|
||
|
|
% math
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
|
||
|
|
% text
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% vertical rules
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
|
||
|
|
{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% horizontal rules
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% plain
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
|
||
|
|
% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
|
||
|
|
% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
|
||
|
|
% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
|
||
|
|
% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
|
||
|
|
\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% creates a blank separator row
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
|
||
|
|
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
||
|
|
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
||
|
|
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
||
|
|
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
||
|
|
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
||
|
|
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
|
||
|
|
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
||
|
|
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
||
|
|
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
||
|
|
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
||
|
|
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
||
|
|
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
|
||
|
|
% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
||
|
|
% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
|
||
|
|
% turn off any struts
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
|
||
|
|
% another single rule row
|
||
|
|
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
||
|
|
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
|
||
|
|
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
|
||
|
|
% another single rule row
|
||
|
|
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
||
|
|
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
|
||
|
|
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
||
|
|
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
|
||
|
|
% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
|
||
|
|
% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
|
||
|
|
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
|
||
|
|
\repeat%
|
||
|
|
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% save values
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% restore values
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% globally restores the strut height and depth to the
|
||
|
|
% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% restore values
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
|
||
|
|
% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
|
||
|
|
% and the use master strut flag, global
|
||
|
|
% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
|
||
|
|
% into the isolation/strut column
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
|
||
|
|
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
|
||
|
|
% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
|
||
|
|
% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
|
||
|
|
% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
|
||
|
|
% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
|
||
|
|
% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
|
||
|
|
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
||
|
|
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
||
|
|
% font is used.
|
||
|
|
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else% arg one present
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi% if null arg
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else% arg two present
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi% if null arg
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
||
|
|
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
|
||
|
|
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
|
||
|
|
% and depth to both the master and local struts.
|
||
|
|
% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
|
||
|
|
% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
|
||
|
|
% of the local strut values.
|
||
|
|
% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
|
||
|
|
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
||
|
|
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
||
|
|
% font is used.
|
||
|
|
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else% arg one present
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi% if null arg
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else% arg two present
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi% if null arg
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
||
|
|
% get local strut size
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
% add it to the user supplied values
|
||
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% update the local strut size
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
||
|
|
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
||
|
|
% get master strut size
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
% add it to the user supplied values
|
||
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% update the local and master strut sizes
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% allow user a way to see the struts
|
||
|
|
\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
|
||
|
|
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
|
||
|
|
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
|
||
|
|
% get master strut size
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
% get local strut size
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
||
|
|
% allow user to see struts if desired
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
||
|
|
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
|
||
|
|
% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
||
|
|
% blank arguments inherit the default values
|
||
|
|
% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\skip0=#1\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\skip2=#2\relax%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
||
|
|
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
||
|
|
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
||
|
|
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
|
||
|
|
% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
|
||
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% equation and subequation forms to use to setup hyperref's \@currentHref
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtheHrefequation{equation.\theHequation}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation{equation.\theHequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
|
||
|
|
% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
|
||
|
|
% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
|
||
|
|
% to document catcode changes.
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]{\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
|
||
|
|
% the star form was involked
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue
|
||
|
|
\else% not the star form
|
||
|
|
\global\@eqnswfalse
|
||
|
|
\fi% if star form
|
||
|
|
% provide a basic hyperref \theHequation if this has not already been setup (hyperref not loaded, or no section counter)
|
||
|
|
\@ifundefined{theHequation}{\def\theHequation{\arabic{equation}}}{}\relax
|
||
|
|
% provide dummy hyperref commands in case hyperref is not loaded
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\Hy@raisedlink}[1]{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\hyper@anchorstart}[1]{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\hyper@anchorend}{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\@currentHref}{}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse% reset eqnpreadv flag
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% reset subeqnpreadv flag
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
||
|
|
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
||
|
|
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
||
|
|
\lineskip=0pt\relax
|
||
|
|
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
|
||
|
|
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
||
|
|
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
||
|
|
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
||
|
|
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
||
|
|
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
||
|
|
%V1.8 Here we preadvance to the next equation number.
|
||
|
|
% If the user later wants a continued subequation, we can roll back.
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation%
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{equation}\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue% advance equation counter before first line
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave\@currentlabel% save current label as we later change it globally
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave\@currentHref% save current href label as we later change it globally
|
||
|
|
\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
|
||
|
|
\def\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
||
|
|
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
||
|
|
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
||
|
|
% put in the column for the equation number
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
||
|
|
\toks0={##}%
|
||
|
|
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
||
|
|
% add the isolation column
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
||
|
|
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
||
|
|
% add the equation number col to the preamble
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
||
|
|
% note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
|
||
|
|
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
||
|
|
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
||
|
|
% begin the display alignment
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
||
|
|
$$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
|
||
|
|
% "exspand" the preamble
|
||
|
|
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
|
||
|
|
% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
|
||
|
|
% restore counters (to backout any equation setup for a next line that was never used)
|
||
|
|
% to their correct values and exit
|
||
|
|
\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\fi
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@currentlabel\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave% restore current label
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@currentHref\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave% restore current href label
|
||
|
|
$$\@ignoretrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
||
|
|
% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
|
||
|
|
% These "cr" macros are modified versions of those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
||
|
|
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
||
|
|
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
|
||
|
|
% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
|
||
|
|
{\ifnum0=`}\fi
|
||
|
|
\@ifstar{%
|
||
|
|
\global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
||
|
|
}{%
|
||
|
|
\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
||
|
|
}%
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
||
|
|
\@@IEEEeqnarraycr
|
||
|
|
\noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
environment}%
|
||
|
|
{Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarray column\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
specifications.}\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
|
||
|
|
\repeat
|
||
|
|
% this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% execute the &'s
|
||
|
|
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
|
||
|
|
% handle the strut/isolation column
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
&% and enter the equation number column
|
||
|
|
\if@eqnsw% only if we display something
|
||
|
|
\Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}}% start a hyperref anchor
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% displaying an equation number means
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% the equation counters point to valid equations
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 Here we setup the counters, currentlabel and status for what would be the *next*
|
||
|
|
% equation line as would be the case under the current settings. However, there are two problems.
|
||
|
|
% One problem is that there might not ever be a next line. The second problem is that the user
|
||
|
|
% may later alter the meaning of a line with commands such as \IEEEyessubnumber. So, to handle
|
||
|
|
% these cases we have to record the current values of the (sub)equation counters and revert back
|
||
|
|
% to them if the next line is changed or never comes. The \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv, \if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv
|
||
|
|
% and \@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback stuff tracks this.
|
||
|
|
% The logic to handle all this is surprisingly complex, but a nice feature of the approach here is
|
||
|
|
% that the equation counters and labels remain valid for what the line would be unless a
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEyessubnumber et al. later changes it. So, any hyperref links are always correct.
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% handle subequation
|
||
|
|
\theIEEEsubequationdis\relax
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else% display a standard equation number
|
||
|
|
\theequationdis\relax
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax% not really needed
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
|
||
|
|
% subequations that follow plain equations carry the same equation number e.g, 5, 5a rather than 5, 6a
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
|
||
|
|
\stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorend}% end hyperref anchor
|
||
|
|
\fi% fi only if we display something
|
||
|
|
% reset the flags to indicate the default preferences of the display of equation numbers
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\else\global\@eqnswfalse\fi
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\fi% ditto for the subequation flag
|
||
|
|
% reset the number of columns the user actually used
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
|
||
|
|
% the real end of the line
|
||
|
|
\cr}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
|
||
|
|
% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
|
||
|
|
% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
|
||
|
|
% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
|
||
|
|
% within an hbox.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
|
||
|
|
% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
|
||
|
|
% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
|
||
|
|
% natural width is the default.
|
||
|
|
% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
|
||
|
|
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
|
||
|
|
% for \vcenter in non-math mode
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
|
||
|
|
% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
|
||
|
|
% to document catcode changes.
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\endgroup\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
||
|
|
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
||
|
|
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
||
|
|
\lineskip=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
||
|
|
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
||
|
|
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
||
|
|
% the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
||
|
|
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
||
|
|
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
||
|
|
\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
||
|
|
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
||
|
|
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
||
|
|
% add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
||
|
|
\toks0={##}%
|
||
|
|
% add the isolation column to the preamble
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
||
|
|
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
||
|
|
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
||
|
|
% begin the alignment
|
||
|
|
\everycr{}%
|
||
|
|
% use only the very first token to determine the positioning
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored
|
||
|
|
% if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
|
||
|
|
% use the appropriate vbox type
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax%
|
||
|
|
\vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
||
|
|
\ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
|
||
|
|
\bgroup
|
||
|
|
% "exspand" the preamble
|
||
|
|
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
|
||
|
|
% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
|
||
|
|
\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
||
|
|
&% enter isolation/strut column
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
|
||
|
|
% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
||
|
|
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
||
|
|
\crcr\egroup\egroup%
|
||
|
|
% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
||
|
|
% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
|
||
|
|
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
||
|
|
% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
|
||
|
|
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
||
|
|
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
|
||
|
|
% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
||
|
|
&% enter isolation/strut column
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
||
|
|
% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
||
|
|
{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
||
|
|
\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers}
|
||
|
|
% starts the halign preamble build
|
||
|
|
% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
|
||
|
|
% ensure these are valid
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
|
||
|
|
% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
|
||
|
|
% use a name that is easier to remember
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
|
||
|
|
% tracks number of columns in the preamble
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
|
||
|
|
% record the default end glues
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers
|
||
|
|
% now parse the user's column specifications
|
||
|
|
% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because
|
||
|
|
% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column}
|
||
|
|
% parses and builds the halign preamble
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
|
||
|
|
% use only the very first token to check the end
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
|
||
|
|
% identify current and next token type
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
|
||
|
|
% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
|
||
|
|
% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
|
||
|
|
% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
|
||
|
|
% process the acquired glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
|
||
|
|
% process the acquired col
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
|
||
|
|
% ready prevtype for next col spec.
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
|
||
|
|
% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
|
||
|
|
\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded}
|
||
|
|
% executed just after preamble build is completed
|
||
|
|
% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
|
||
|
|
% argument is not used
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
|
||
|
|
{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%num cols less than 1
|
||
|
|
%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more}
|
||
|
|
% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given
|
||
|
|
% \output macro:
|
||
|
|
% n = number
|
||
|
|
% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
|
||
|
|
% c = letter
|
||
|
|
% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence)
|
||
|
|
% u = undefined
|
||
|
|
% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
|
||
|
|
% use only the very first token to determine the type
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
|
||
|
|
\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else
|
||
|
|
\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
|
||
|
|
\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
|
||
|
|
\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax
|
||
|
|
\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
\if#2u\relax
|
||
|
|
\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
|
||
|
|
{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier}
|
||
|
|
% verify the letter referenced column exists
|
||
|
|
% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname
|
||
|
|
% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
Using a default centering column instead}%
|
||
|
|
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output}
|
||
|
|
% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value
|
||
|
|
% and return it in the given output macro
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
|
||
|
|
% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
|
||
|
|
% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
|
||
|
|
% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
|
||
|
|
% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
|
||
|
|
% ' = \quad 1em
|
||
|
|
% " = \qquad 2em
|
||
|
|
% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
|
||
|
|
% / = \arraycolsep
|
||
|
|
% ? = 2\arraycolsep
|
||
|
|
% * = 1fil
|
||
|
|
% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
|
||
|
|
% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
|
||
|
|
% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
|
||
|
|
% value for 1em.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% use only the very first token to determine the type
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% get the math font 1em value
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
|
||
|
|
% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
|
||
|
|
% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
|
||
|
|
% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
|
||
|
|
% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
|
||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
|
||
|
|
% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
|
||
|
|
% identify the glue value based on the first token
|
||
|
|
% we discard anything after the first
|
||
|
|
\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
|
||
|
|
\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
||
|
|
\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
|
||
|
|
\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
|
||
|
|
\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
|
||
|
|
\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
0pt instead}%
|
||
|
|
{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit}
|
||
|
|
% process a numerical digit from the column specification
|
||
|
|
% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
|
||
|
|
% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
after the first}%
|
||
|
|
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
|
||
|
|
\else% if we previously aborted a glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
|
||
|
|
\else%acquire this number
|
||
|
|
% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
|
||
|
|
\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\else%user glue not defined
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
0pt instead}%
|
||
|
|
{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
||
|
|
\fi% glue defined or not
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
|
||
|
|
\fi%close acquisition, get glue
|
||
|
|
\fi%discard or acquire number
|
||
|
|
\fi%prevtype glue or not
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% process an acquired glue
|
||
|
|
% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
|
||
|
|
% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
||
|
|
\else%not the start glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
after the first}%
|
||
|
|
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
||
|
|
\else% not a back to back glue
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
|
||
|
|
\toks0={##}%
|
||
|
|
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
||
|
|
% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
||
|
|
% the column definition
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
||
|
|
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
||
|
|
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
||
|
|
\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
specifier}%
|
||
|
|
{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
|
||
|
|
between column types.}%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
||
|
|
\fi% previous was a column
|
||
|
|
\fi% back-to-back glues
|
||
|
|
\fi% is start column glue
|
||
|
|
\fi% prev type not a
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
|
||
|
|
% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
|
||
|
|
% so we must add this column to the preamble now
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
|
||
|
|
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
|
||
|
|
\toks0={##}%
|
||
|
|
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
||
|
|
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
||
|
|
% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
||
|
|
% the column definition
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
||
|
|
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
||
|
|
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
||
|
|
\fi%next type not numeral
|
||
|
|
\fi%next type not glue
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% END OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set up the running headers and footers
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% header and footer font and size specifications
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% compsoc uses sans-serif headers and footers
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% standard page style, ps@headings
|
||
|
|
\def\ps@headings{% default to standard twoside headers, no footers
|
||
|
|
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\rightmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
||
|
|
% technote twoside
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
% draft footers
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% oneside
|
||
|
|
\if@twoside\else
|
||
|
|
% standard one side headers
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
% oneside draft footers
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% turn off headers for conferences
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% turn off footers for draftclsnofoot
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% title page style, ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle
|
||
|
|
\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{% default title page headers, no footers
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
% draft footers
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
||
|
|
% but only if not draftclsnofoot
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% all nondraft mode footers
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
||
|
|
% for title pages that are using a pubid
|
||
|
|
% do not repeat pubid on the title page if using a peer review cover page
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
||
|
|
% for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
|
||
|
|
% is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% turn off headers for conferences
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% peer review cover page style, ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle
|
||
|
|
\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% default peer review cover no headers, no footers
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenhead\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
|
||
|
|
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
% draft footers
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
||
|
|
% but only if not draftclsnofoot
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% all nondraft mode footers
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
||
|
|
% for peer review cover pages that are using a pubid
|
||
|
|
% for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
|
||
|
|
% is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
|
||
|
|
\def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% Defines the command for putting the header.
|
||
|
|
%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
|
||
|
|
%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
|
||
|
|
%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
|
||
|
|
%% arguments to \markboth.
|
||
|
|
%% V1.7b add \protect to work with Babel
|
||
|
|
\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#2}}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
|
||
|
|
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
||
|
|
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
||
|
|
\space\number\day, \number\year}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
|
||
|
|
\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
|
||
|
|
\let\@citea\@empty
|
||
|
|
\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
|
||
|
|
{\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
|
||
|
|
\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
|
||
|
|
\@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
|
||
|
|
\G@refundefinedtrue
|
||
|
|
\@latex@warning
|
||
|
|
{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
|
||
|
|
{\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
|
||
|
|
% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
|
||
|
|
% following format controls are already defined and will not
|
||
|
|
% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
|
||
|
|
% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
|
||
|
|
% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
|
||
|
|
% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
|
||
|
|
% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
|
||
|
|
% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
|
||
|
|
% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
|
||
|
|
% that \cite.
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
|
||
|
|
% to produce the IEEE style.
|
||
|
|
\def\citepunct{], [}
|
||
|
|
\def\citedash{]--[}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
|
||
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 class files should always provide these
|
||
|
|
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
|
||
|
|
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
|
||
|
|
% V1.8b article.cls is now providing these too
|
||
|
|
% we do not use \@mkboth, nor alter the page style
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{theindex}
|
||
|
|
{\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@restonecolfalse
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@restonecoltrue
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
|
||
|
|
\parindent\z@
|
||
|
|
\parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
|
||
|
|
\columnseprule \z@
|
||
|
|
\columnsep 35\p@
|
||
|
|
\let\item\@idxitem}
|
||
|
|
{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
|
||
|
|
\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
|
||
|
|
\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
|
||
|
|
\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
|
||
|
|
\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
|
||
|
|
% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
|
||
|
|
% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
|
||
|
|
% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
|
||
|
|
\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
|
||
|
|
\@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
|
||
|
|
\if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
|
||
|
|
\@esphack}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEnoauxwrite{} allows for citations that do not add to or affect
|
||
|
|
% the order of the existing citation list. Can be useful for \cite
|
||
|
|
% within \thanks{}.
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEnoauxwrite}[1]{\relax
|
||
|
|
\if@filesw
|
||
|
|
\@fileswfalse
|
||
|
|
#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
|
||
|
|
\@fileswtrue
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
|
||
|
|
% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
|
||
|
|
% the columns on the last page
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that
|
||
|
|
% the command is not executed
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% allow the user to alter the triggered command
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
|
||
|
|
% command is executed
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% trigger command at the given reference
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% controls bib item spacing
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
||
|
|
{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\leftmargin\labelwidth
|
||
|
|
\advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
|
||
|
|
\usecounter{enumiv}%
|
||
|
|
\let\p@enumiv\@empty
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
|
||
|
|
\def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
|
||
|
|
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
|
||
|
|
% originally:
|
||
|
|
% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
|
||
|
|
% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
|
||
|
|
% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
|
||
|
|
% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
|
||
|
|
% but the final result will be much more like what the IEEE will publish.
|
||
|
|
% MDS 11/2000
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
|
||
|
|
\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
|
||
|
|
\sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
|
||
|
|
\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
|
||
|
|
% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
|
||
|
|
% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
|
||
|
|
% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
|
||
|
|
% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
|
||
|
|
% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
|
||
|
|
% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
|
||
|
|
% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
|
||
|
|
% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
|
||
|
|
% with the text above.
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 make this a robust command
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 transmag uses an arabic author affiliation symbol
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize #1}}}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
|
||
|
|
\mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
|
||
|
|
\or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
|
||
|
|
% The default if the user does not use an author block
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% adjustment spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
|
||
|
|
% can be negative
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conferences need more space here
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
||
|
|
% This can be negative.
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
|
||
|
|
% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
|
||
|
|
% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
|
||
|
|
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
|
||
|
|
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
% transmag uses one line of space above first affiliation block
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{1\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
||
|
|
% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
|
||
|
|
% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
|
||
|
|
% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
|
||
|
|
% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
|
||
|
|
% these above 2.6ex
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This tracks the required strut size.
|
||
|
|
% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% variables to retain font size and style across groups
|
||
|
|
% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% saves the current font attributes
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% restores the saved font attributes
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
|
||
|
|
\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
|
||
|
|
\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
|
||
|
|
\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
|
||
|
|
\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
|
||
|
|
\selectfont}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
|
||
|
|
% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
|
||
|
|
% within the halign environment.
|
||
|
|
% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
|
||
|
|
% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
|
||
|
|
% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
||
|
|
\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
|
||
|
|
% Makes formatting easy for conferences
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% use real definitions in conference mode
|
||
|
|
% name block
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
|
||
|
|
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
||
|
|
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
||
|
|
% do a spacer row if needed
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
||
|
|
%restore the correct strut value
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
|
||
|
|
% input the author names
|
||
|
|
#1%
|
||
|
|
% end the row if the user did not already
|
||
|
|
\crcr}
|
||
|
|
% spacer row for names
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% affiliation block
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
|
||
|
|
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
||
|
|
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
||
|
|
% do a spacer row if needed
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
||
|
|
%restore the correct strut value
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
|
||
|
|
% input the author affiliations
|
||
|
|
#1%
|
||
|
|
% end the row if the user did not already
|
||
|
|
\crcr
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 transmag does not use any additional affiliation spacing after the first author
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0pt}\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% spacer row for affiliations
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
|
||
|
|
% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
|
||
|
|
% not conference, peerreviewca or transmag mode
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\else
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
|
||
|
|
\lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
|
||
|
|
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
|
||
|
|
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
||
|
|
\let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
|
||
|
|
\tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
|
||
|
|
\everycr{}% ensure no problems here
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
|
||
|
|
\vtop\bgroup%vtop box
|
||
|
|
\halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
|
||
|
|
\hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
||
|
|
\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% handle bogus star form
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
||
|
|
\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% end the line and do the optional spacer
|
||
|
|
\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNandtrue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
|
||
|
|
% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
|
||
|
|
% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
|
||
|
|
\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
|
||
|
|
when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 transmag uses conference author format
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% page clearing command
|
||
|
|
% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
|
||
|
|
% for the inserted blank pages
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
|
||
|
|
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8b hooks to allow adjustment of space above title
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEtitletopspace{0.5\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
% an added extra amount to allow for adjustment/offset
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEtitletopspaceextra{0pt}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% user command to invoke the title page
|
||
|
|
\def\maketitle{\par%
|
||
|
|
\begingroup%
|
||
|
|
\normalfont%
|
||
|
|
\def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty
|
||
|
|
\def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
|
||
|
|
\let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
|
||
|
|
\footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines
|
||
|
|
\footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
|
||
|
|
\normalsize%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
||
|
|
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
||
|
|
\thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
||
|
|
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% pullup page for pubid if used.
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
||
|
|
\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@thanks{}%
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
|
||
|
|
% \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
|
||
|
|
\let\thanks\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 compsoc is partial width
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3%
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
|
||
|
|
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
|
||
|
|
% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
|
||
|
|
\def\@maketitle{\newpage
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\vskip\IEEEtitletopspace\vskip\IEEEtitletopspaceextra\centering%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes
|
||
|
|
{\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% not a technote
|
||
|
|
\vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par%
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
||
|
|
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
||
|
|
% peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
||
|
|
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
|
||
|
|
\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% journal, peerreview or transmag
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
% transmag also handles author names just like conference mode
|
||
|
|
% it also uses \@IEEEtitleabstractindextex, but with one line less
|
||
|
|
% space above, and one more below
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
||
|
|
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
|
||
|
|
{\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\relax\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\par}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% journal or peerreview
|
||
|
|
{\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
|
||
|
|
\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
|
||
|
|
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths.
|
||
|
|
% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column)
|
||
|
|
% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column)
|
||
|
|
% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax
|
||
|
|
\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
|
||
|
|
% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
|
||
|
|
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
||
|
|
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
|
||
|
|
\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
|
||
|
|
\let\@thanks\@empty
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
|
||
|
|
\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
|
||
|
|
% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
|
||
|
|
\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
|
||
|
|
% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
|
||
|
|
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
||
|
|
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
|
||
|
|
{\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
|
||
|
|
\protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
|
||
|
|
% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
|
||
|
|
{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
|
||
|
|
\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
||
|
|
\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}]
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
|
||
|
|
\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6
|
||
|
|
% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
|
||
|
|
% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
|
||
|
|
% of two column text (technotes).
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
|
||
|
|
% adjust spacing to next text
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b handle peer review papers
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
||
|
|
% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
|
||
|
|
% regardless of the other paper modes
|
||
|
|
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
|
||
|
|
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
|
||
|
|
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\else% journal uses more space
|
||
|
|
\vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer
|
||
|
|
% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
|
||
|
|
% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened
|
||
|
|
% default to journal values
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}}
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl]
|
||
|
|
% {top baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
|
||
|
|
% {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with
|
||
|
|
% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command
|
||
|
|
% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated
|
||
|
|
% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register
|
||
|
|
% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace*
|
||
|
|
% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just
|
||
|
|
% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow
|
||
|
|
% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal
|
||
|
|
% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ).
|
||
|
|
% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum
|
||
|
|
% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves
|
||
|
|
% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest
|
||
|
|
% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special
|
||
|
|
% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated
|
||
|
|
% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the
|
||
|
|
% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the
|
||
|
|
% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then
|
||
|
|
% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and
|
||
|
|
% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height
|
||
|
|
% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount =
|
||
|
|
% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line
|
||
|
|
% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned.
|
||
|
|
% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page
|
||
|
|
% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more
|
||
|
|
% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth >
|
||
|
|
% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and
|
||
|
|
% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and
|
||
|
|
% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit
|
||
|
|
% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the
|
||
|
|
% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted
|
||
|
|
% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into
|
||
|
|
% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close"
|
||
|
|
% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth,
|
||
|
|
% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the
|
||
|
|
% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier
|
||
|
|
% \topskip spacing rules are in effect.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of
|
||
|
|
% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top
|
||
|
|
% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even
|
||
|
|
% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a
|
||
|
|
% correction.
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Common combinations of these parameters include:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% top baselineskip: (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.)
|
||
|
|
% \topskip % for objects that appear at the top of a page
|
||
|
|
% \maxdimen % always ignore the height of the top line
|
||
|
|
% 0pt % always consider any positive height of the top line
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% for objects to appear inline in normal text:
|
||
|
|
% top baselineskip = \baselineskip
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the
|
||
|
|
% overall height of the object without any other external skip
|
||
|
|
% consideration
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform % flag to indicate star form
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used
|
||
|
|
% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a
|
||
|
|
% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change
|
||
|
|
\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple
|
||
|
|
\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
|
||
|
|
% acquire and store
|
||
|
|
% #1 optional output dimen register
|
||
|
|
% #2 object
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
% allow for object specifications that contain parameters
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax
|
||
|
|
\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
|
||
|
|
% acquire and store
|
||
|
|
% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user
|
||
|
|
% #2 top baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% acquire optional argument set and store
|
||
|
|
% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
|
||
|
|
\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% main routine
|
||
|
|
\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeobject
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeoffset
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizelineskip
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace
|
||
|
|
% get overall height of object
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
|
||
|
|
% get height of first line of object
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect
|
||
|
|
% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit,
|
||
|
|
% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all.
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
|
||
|
|
% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the
|
||
|
|
% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
|
||
|
|
% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
|
||
|
|
% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of
|
||
|
|
% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% adjust height for any manual offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax
|
||
|
|
% add in nominal spacer
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
|
||
|
|
% check for nonzero unitheight
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}%
|
||
|
|
{Division by zero is not allowed.}
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% get integer number of lines
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines
|
||
|
|
% A = height - multiple*unitheight
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
|
||
|
|
% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines
|
||
|
|
% B = unitheight - A
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
|
||
|
|
% choose A or B based on which is closer
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax
|
||
|
|
% A + B = unitheight
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% export object and spacer outside of group
|
||
|
|
\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax
|
||
|
|
\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\gdef\def
|
||
|
|
\let\xdef\edef}
|
||
|
|
% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6
|
||
|
|
% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
|
||
|
|
% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
|
||
|
|
% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
|
||
|
|
% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
|
||
|
|
% in the dynamic sizer.
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax
|
||
|
|
\long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if
|
||
|
|
% not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords
|
||
|
|
% can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext{%
|
||
|
|
% display for all conference formats
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
|
||
|
|
\else% non-conferences
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a display for all technotes
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax
|
||
|
|
\else % non-conferences and non-technotes
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
\else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
|
||
|
|
% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
|
||
|
|
\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% abstract and keywords are in \small, except
|
||
|
|
% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
|
||
|
|
% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
|
||
|
|
% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
|
||
|
|
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
|
||
|
|
% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
|
||
|
|
\def\abstract{\normalfont
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 The IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
|
||
|
|
% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
|
||
|
|
\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\normalsize}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
|
||
|
|
\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\normalsize}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
|
||
|
|
\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\else% compsoc not conference
|
||
|
|
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
|
||
|
|
\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 transmag keywords index terms
|
||
|
|
% no abstract name, use indentation
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
\def\abstract{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\indent
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\vspace{1\baselineskip}\bfseries\indent\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\bgroup\par\vspace{1\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
||
|
|
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
|
||
|
|
% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
|
||
|
|
% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
|
||
|
|
% affect the formatting of the text
|
||
|
|
\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% a control space will come in as a macro
|
||
|
|
% when it is the last one on a line
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
|
||
|
|
% else spit it out and stop gobbling
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% TITLING OF SECTIONS
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are
|
||
|
|
% part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
|
||
|
|
% spacing from section number to title
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% compsoc journals need extra spacing
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
|
||
|
|
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
|
||
|
|
%and use \@@par rather than \par
|
||
|
|
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
|
||
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
|
||
|
|
\let\@svsec\@empty
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{#1}%
|
||
|
|
% load section label and spacer into \@svsec
|
||
|
|
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\@tempskipa #5\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
|
||
|
|
\begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
|
||
|
|
\noindent % subsections are NOT indented
|
||
|
|
% print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
||
|
|
{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
||
|
|
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
|
||
|
|
\else % printout low level headings
|
||
|
|
% svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
||
|
|
% got rid of sectionmark stuff
|
||
|
|
\def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
||
|
|
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi%skip down
|
||
|
|
\@xsect{#5}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% section* handler
|
||
|
|
%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
|
||
|
|
%and use \@@par rather than \par
|
||
|
|
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
|
||
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
||
|
|
%\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
||
|
|
\begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
||
|
|
\else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
|
||
|
|
\@xsect{#3}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% SECTION heading spacing and font
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
|
||
|
|
% (for \@sect) #2 - section level
|
||
|
|
% #3 - section heading indent
|
||
|
|
% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
|
||
|
|
% If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
|
||
|
|
% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
|
||
|
|
% negative: amount to indent main text after heading
|
||
|
|
% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
|
||
|
|
% #6 - font control
|
||
|
|
% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
|
||
|
|
% trouble when you do something like:
|
||
|
|
% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
|
||
|
|
% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
|
||
|
|
% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\else % for journals
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% for both journals and conferences
|
||
|
|
% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
|
||
|
|
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% compsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
% compsoc conference
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
||
|
|
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
||
|
|
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
||
|
|
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
||
|
|
\else% compsoc journals
|
||
|
|
% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
|
||
|
|
% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
|
||
|
|
% I have to look up an example.
|
||
|
|
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% transmag
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
|
||
|
|
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{0.75\parindent}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{1.25\parindent}{0.1ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
||
|
|
{0.1ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer
|
||
|
|
% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section
|
||
|
|
% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it.
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those
|
||
|
|
% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top
|
||
|
|
% of the next section.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% ENVIRONMENTS
|
||
|
|
% "box" symbols at end of proofs
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%V1.8 flag to indicate if QED symbol is to be shown
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEQEDshow \@IEEEQEDshowtrue
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEproofindentspace{2\parindent}% V1.8 allow user to change indentation amount if desired
|
||
|
|
% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
|
||
|
|
% for an optional argument.
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\@IEEEQEDshowtrue\par\noindent\hspace{\IEEEproofindentspace}{\itshape #1: }}
|
||
|
|
\def\endIEEEproof{\if@IEEEQEDshow\hspace*{\fill}\nobreakspace\IEEEQED\fi\par}
|
||
|
|
% qedhere for equation environments, similar to AMS \qedhere
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQEDhereeqn{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax
|
||
|
|
\let\veqno\relax\hbox{\IEEEQED}}
|
||
|
|
% IEEE style qedhere for IEEEeqnarray and other environments
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQEDhere{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\IEEEQED}
|
||
|
|
% command to disable QED at end of IEEEproof
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEQEDoff{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
|
||
|
|
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
|
||
|
|
\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
|
||
|
|
\item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
|
||
|
|
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
|
||
|
|
\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
||
|
|
\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
|
||
|
|
\item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
|
||
|
|
% lines below.
|
||
|
|
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% noncompsoc
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
|
||
|
|
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
|
||
|
|
\item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2:} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
|
||
|
|
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
|
||
|
|
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
|
||
|
|
\item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2\ (#3):} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
|
||
|
|
% lines below.
|
||
|
|
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6
|
||
|
|
% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
|
||
|
|
% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
|
||
|
|
% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
||
|
|
% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
|
||
|
|
% string macro
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
||
|
|
% if section in_counter is used
|
||
|
|
\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
|
||
|
|
{\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
|
||
|
|
\edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
|
||
|
|
\ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
||
|
|
\noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
|
||
|
|
\@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
||
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
|
||
|
|
\@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
|
||
|
|
\global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
|
||
|
|
\pagestyle{headings}
|
||
|
|
\pagenumbering{arabic}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% normally the page counter starts at 1
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{page}{1}
|
||
|
|
% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
|
||
|
|
% (for duplex printing)
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
||
|
|
\if@twoside
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{page}{-1}
|
||
|
|
\else
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{page}{0}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
|
||
|
|
% needed when single sided
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
|
||
|
|
% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
|
||
|
|
% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
||
|
|
% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
||
|
|
\twocolumn
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
\sloppy
|
||
|
|
\flushbottom
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
|
||
|
|
% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
||
|
|
% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
|
||
|
|
% is present or not.
|
||
|
|
% For instance:
|
||
|
|
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
|
||
|
|
% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
|
||
|
|
% \appendices is invoked.
|
||
|
|
% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
|
||
|
|
% on whether the user specifies a title:
|
||
|
|
% \section{My appendix title}
|
||
|
|
% or not:
|
||
|
|
% \section{}
|
||
|
|
% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
|
||
|
|
% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
|
||
|
|
% contents
|
||
|
|
\begingroup
|
||
|
|
\catcode`\Q=3
|
||
|
|
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
|
||
|
|
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
|
||
|
|
\endgroup
|
||
|
|
% end of \@ifmtarg defs
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7
|
||
|
|
% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
|
||
|
|
% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
|
||
|
|
% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
|
||
|
|
% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
|
||
|
|
% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
|
||
|
|
% argument (title)
|
||
|
|
% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
|
||
|
|
\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection}}{%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis\\* #1}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection: #1}}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
|
||
|
|
% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
|
||
|
|
% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
|
||
|
|
\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
|
||
|
|
% and in the Table of Contents.
|
||
|
|
% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% appendix command for one single appendix
|
||
|
|
% normally has no heading. However, if you want a
|
||
|
|
% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
|
||
|
|
% \appendix[Optional Heading]
|
||
|
|
\def\appendix{\relax}
|
||
|
|
\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
||
|
|
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
||
|
|
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
|
||
|
|
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
||
|
|
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{section}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesection{A}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesectiondis{}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
||
|
|
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\\* #1}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
|
||
|
|
% redefine \section command for appendix
|
||
|
|
% leave \section* as is
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
|
||
|
|
% of the normal form
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% appendices command for multiple appendices
|
||
|
|
% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
|
||
|
|
% declare the individual appendices
|
||
|
|
\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
||
|
|
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
||
|
|
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
|
||
|
|
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
||
|
|
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
|
||
|
|
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
|
||
|
|
% redefine \section command for appendices
|
||
|
|
% leave \section* as is
|
||
|
|
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
|
||
|
|
% of the normal form
|
||
|
|
}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
|
||
|
|
% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
|
||
|
|
% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
|
||
|
|
% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
|
||
|
|
% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
|
||
|
|
% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
|
||
|
|
% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
|
||
|
|
% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
|
||
|
|
% interword glue will now work as normal.
|
||
|
|
% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
|
||
|
|
% to change the font style.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
|
||
|
|
% may need to increase if using decenders
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2}
|
||
|
|
% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
|
||
|
|
% be overly cautious
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
|
||
|
|
% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}{T}
|
||
|
|
% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
|
||
|
|
% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
|
||
|
|
% of this value and the height of the \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
|
||
|
|
% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% so that it can respond to changes therein.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
|
||
|
|
% can take zero or one argument.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE}{\bfseries}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
||
|
|
% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
|
||
|
|
% can take zero or one argument.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE}{\relax}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
||
|
|
% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
|
||
|
|
% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
|
||
|
|
% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
|
||
|
|
% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}{0em}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
|
||
|
|
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}{\/}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% width of the letter output, set globally. Can be used in \IEEEPARstartSEP
|
||
|
|
% or \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, but not the height lengths.
|
||
|
|
\newdimen\IEEEPARstartletwidth
|
||
|
|
\IEEEPARstartletwidth 0pt\relax
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% definition of \IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
|
||
|
|
% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
|
||
|
|
% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
|
||
|
|
% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
|
||
|
|
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
||
|
|
% on a new one
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
|
||
|
|
% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
|
||
|
|
\noindent
|
||
|
|
% calculate the desired height of the big letter
|
||
|
|
% it extends from the top of \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
|
||
|
|
% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
|
||
|
|
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
|
||
|
|
% extract the name of the current font in bold
|
||
|
|
% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
|
||
|
|
{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
|
||
|
|
\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
|
||
|
|
% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
|
||
|
|
% height of the drop letter
|
||
|
|
\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
|
||
|
|
% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
||
|
|
% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
|
||
|
|
% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
|
||
|
|
% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% and store it as a counter
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
||
|
|
% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
|
||
|
|
% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
|
||
|
|
% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
||
|
|
% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
||
|
|
% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
|
||
|
|
% division. Hence the use of the counters.
|
||
|
|
% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
|
||
|
|
% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
|
||
|
|
% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
|
||
|
|
% floating point values
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
||
|
|
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
|
||
|
|
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
|
||
|
|
% big letter.
|
||
|
|
\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
||
|
|
% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
|
||
|
|
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
|
||
|
|
% hanging indent
|
||
|
|
\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
|
||
|
|
\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
|
||
|
|
% end of the isolated calculation environment
|
||
|
|
\global\IEEEPARstartletwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
|
||
|
|
% add in the extra clearance we want
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
|
||
|
|
% add in the optional offset
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
||
|
|
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
|
||
|
|
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
|
||
|
|
% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
|
||
|
|
% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
|
||
|
|
% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
|
||
|
|
% text won't be displaced by it.
|
||
|
|
\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
|
||
|
|
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
|
||
|
|
\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEPARstartfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
|
||
|
|
\hspace{\IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
|
||
|
|
{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
|
||
|
|
% than the specified space of argument one
|
||
|
|
% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
|
||
|
|
% and issue a \newpage
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
|
||
|
|
% be overly cautious
|
||
|
|
% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
|
||
|
|
% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
|
||
|
|
% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
|
||
|
|
% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
|
||
|
|
\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
|
||
|
|
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
|
||
|
|
\newpage%
|
||
|
|
\fi\endgroup}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
|
||
|
|
% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
|
||
|
|
% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
|
||
|
|
% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
|
||
|
|
% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
|
||
|
|
% MDS 7/2001
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
|
||
|
|
% and not just the previous section
|
||
|
|
\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% photo area size
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area
|
||
|
|
% area cleared for photo
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area
|
||
|
|
% actual depth will be a multiple of
|
||
|
|
% \baselineskip, rounded up
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
|
||
|
|
\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
|
||
|
|
% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
|
||
|
|
% the nominal value of the spacer
|
||
|
|
% and one extra line for good measure
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
||
|
|
% with a new one
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
|
||
|
|
% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
|
||
|
|
\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
% the default box for where the photo goes
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
|
||
|
|
\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
|
||
|
|
% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
|
||
|
|
% and if so, override the default box with what they want
|
||
|
|
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
|
||
|
|
\centering%
|
||
|
|
#1%
|
||
|
|
\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
|
||
|
|
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
||
|
|
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
||
|
|
% to the biography, not the previous section
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% one more biography
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
||
|
|
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
|
||
|
|
% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
|
||
|
|
% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
|
||
|
|
% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
|
||
|
|
\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
|
||
|
|
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
|
||
|
|
% set the hanging indent
|
||
|
|
\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
|
||
|
|
\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
||
|
|
% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
|
||
|
|
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
|
||
|
|
% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
|
||
|
|
\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
|
||
|
|
\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
|
||
|
|
% now place the author name and begin the bio text
|
||
|
|
\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
|
||
|
|
% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
|
||
|
|
% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
|
||
|
|
% MDS
|
||
|
|
\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
|
||
|
|
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
|
||
|
|
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
||
|
|
\noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
\par\normalfont}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.6
|
||
|
|
% added biography without a photo environment
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
|
||
|
|
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
||
|
|
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
||
|
|
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
||
|
|
% to the biography, not the previous section
|
||
|
|
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
||
|
|
\fi%
|
||
|
|
% one more biography
|
||
|
|
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
||
|
|
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
||
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
|
||
|
|
\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
|
||
|
|
\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
||
|
|
\parskip=0pt\par%
|
||
|
|
\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provide the user with some old font commands
|
||
|
|
% got this from article.cls
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
|
||
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% holds the special notice text
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
|
||
|
|
\else%
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
|
||
|
|
\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
|
||
|
|
% to insert a publisher's ID footer
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
|
||
|
|
% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
|
||
|
|
% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
|
||
|
|
% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
|
||
|
|
% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
|
||
|
|
% names and the maintext.
|
||
|
|
%
|
||
|
|
% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
|
||
|
|
% publisher's ID footer
|
||
|
|
% The IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
|
||
|
|
% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
||
|
|
% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
|
||
|
|
% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
|
||
|
|
% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
|
||
|
|
% second column
|
||
|
|
% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
|
||
|
|
% Information Theory") in which the IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
|
||
|
|
% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
|
||
|
|
% and call it even.
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% holds the ID text
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
||
|
|
\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
|
||
|
|
% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
|
||
|
|
% V1.6 use before \maketitle
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
|
||
|
|
% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
|
||
|
|
% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
|
||
|
|
% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
|
||
|
|
% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
|
||
|
|
% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
|
||
|
|
% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
|
||
|
|
% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
|
||
|
|
% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
|
||
|
|
% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
||
|
|
\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
|
||
|
|
% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
|
||
|
|
% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% general purpose bit bucket
|
||
|
|
\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
|
||
|
|
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
|
||
|
|
\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
|
||
|
|
%%
|
||
|
|
% save commands which might be locked out
|
||
|
|
% so that the user can later restore them if needed
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
|
||
|
|
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
|
||
|
|
% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
|
||
|
|
% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
|
||
|
|
% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
|
||
|
|
% paper.
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
% and for technotes
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
|
||
|
|
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
||
|
|
% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
|
||
|
|
% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
|
||
|
|
% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
|
||
|
|
% from filling up with redundant messages
|
||
|
|
\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
|
||
|
|
% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
|
||
|
|
% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
|
||
|
|
% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
|
||
|
|
% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
|
||
|
|
% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
|
||
|
|
% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
|
||
|
|
% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
|
||
|
|
% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
|
||
|
|
% name can be left undisturbed.
|
||
|
|
\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
||
|
|
% and make biography point to our bogus biography
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
|
||
|
|
\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
|
||
|
|
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
|
||
|
|
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
|
||
|
|
\fi
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
|
||
|
|
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
||
|
|
\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
|
||
|
|
\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
||
|
|
\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
|
||
|
|
\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% need a backslash character for typeout output
|
||
|
|
{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
|
||
|
|
|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
|
||
|
|
\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
|
||
|
|
Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% provide some legacy IEEEtran commands
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext}
|
||
|
|
\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}
|
||
|
|
% provide some legacy IEEEtran environments
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands
|
||
|
|
%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
|
||
|
|
%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
|
||
|
|
%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
|
||
|
|
%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
|
||
|
|
%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
|
||
|
|
%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
|
||
|
|
%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
|
||
|
|
% and environments
|
||
|
|
%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
|
||
|
|
%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands
|
||
|
|
%\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
|
||
|
|
%\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
|
||
|
|
%\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
|
||
|
|
%\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
|
||
|
|
%\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
|
||
|
|
%\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
|
||
|
|
%\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 no more support for QED and proof stuff
|
||
|
|
%\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
|
||
|
|
%\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
|
||
|
|
%\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
|
||
|
|
%\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
|
||
|
|
% V1.8 no longer support biography or biographynophoto
|
||
|
|
%\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
|
||
|
|
%\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
|
||
|
|
%\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
|
||
|
|
%\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
|
||
|
|
% V1.7 and later no longer supports \overrideIEEEmargins
|
||
|
|
%\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
|
||
|
|
%\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
||
|
|
%\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
\endinput
|
||
|
|
|
||
|
|
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||
|
|
% That's all folks!
|
||
|
|
|